JP7479954B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There are pachinko gaming machines that enhance the interest of gaming by using a so-called variable display game, in which a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming medium enters a winning area such as a winning hole provided in the gaming area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, multiple types of identification information (hereinafter, display patterns) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined gaming value is awarded is determined based on the display result. In such pachinko gaming machines, when the stopped pattern pattern when the variable display of the display pattern in the variable display game completely stops becomes a specific display pattern, a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) is reached that is advantageous to the player. In the jackpot gaming state, a round game in which the big winning hole is open can be repeatedly played up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the big prize opening opens earlier than the timing of switching the display of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-104625 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning in the big prize slot increases when the gaming medium is released before the number of rounds is displayed, this is still not sufficient from the viewpoint of optimally displaying the number of balls won, and there is a risk that this will cause anxiety to the player and reduce their interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state,
The display means is
A display area is provided in which an image can be displayed, and a display image of game-related information relating to the progress of a game can be displayed in the display area;
When the round of play is being played, a given amount display regarding the given amount of gaming value is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined display is not displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount, and a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed;
When the round game is being played, a guide display can be displayed before the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state,
not displaying a round game display capable of identifying the started round game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and displaying the round game display together with the start of the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
The guidance display is displayed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means so that more of the light emitting means emit light when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed.
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
It has a display area capable of displaying images, and is capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) in the display area (e.g., the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J) (e.g., the image display device 5),
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the specified period, a specific display different from the specified display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the acquired number display), and when displaying the specific display, a count-up display is performed to indicate that the gaming value has been awarded, and then a display according to the acquired gaming value is displayed as the specific display (for example, a count-up display is performed as a notification display indicating that the acquired number is increasing, and then "0015" is displayed).
moreover,
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that creates a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy. In addition, a count-up display is made when the specific display is made, which makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and the number of wins will increase. In addition, a displaced specific image in which at least a portion of the specific image displayed in the specified performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to when the image data of these displaced specific images are stored exclusively. In addition, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image, which would reduce the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In addition, the form for implementing the invention described below includes the invention related to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing an effect (specific effect) in which an image displayed on an image display device (display means) breaks and scatters at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in JP 2019-141396 A. However, in such gaming machines, since the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, it is conceivable to improve the interest of the effect by executing the effect while other images are displayed on the image display device. In this case, however, there is a problem that dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and there is a risk that the amount of data stored in the storage means may become excessively large. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can reduce the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying images, and capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) on the display area (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a portion for generating a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a displaced specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to a case in which image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. Also, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced in accordance with the displacement of the specific image, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a performance control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a display image processing process. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. A figure showing the presentation form of the reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival performance in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation format of the pre-reading preview presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modified example and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the temporary stop notification presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a display of a stereoscopic image in a modified example. FIG. A diagram showing the presentation form of the variable display preview presentation and development suggestion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left part, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left part, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right part, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right part. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2. In addition, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R parts corresponding to each other. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. In addition, lamps 9g near the general winning openings are provided near the three general winning openings 10 located at the lower left of the game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, lamp below the display device 9f, and lamp near the general winning opening 9g may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, lamp below the display device 9f, and lamp near the general winning opening 9g are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get prize balls by making the game ball enter the large prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot game state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is shot into the right-side game area so that the game ball enters the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small prizes."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period in which the attacker is opened in the first round of play, and if the attacker is not won within the predetermined period, a predetermined display is made to indicate that the number of winning balls has not increased, and if the attacker is won within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. Below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 10-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the winning start designation command may be stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. After that, the big win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the probability change state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, a process of clearing the special chart change count counter for counting the number of times the special chart game is executed in the probability change state or the time-saving state, etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process of the large prize opening (step 042AKS006), and the special pattern stop process is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similar to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 042AKS012). After executing either the processing of step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, a judgment is made as to whether or not to end the special pattern state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the value of the special pattern change count counter (special pattern change count value) is updated, for example, by subtracting or adding 1, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the updated special pattern change count value matches a predetermined special game state end judgment value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end judgment value, the special pattern state or the time-saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the special pattern state flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, etc. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end judgment value, the state of the special game state flag or time-saving flag is maintained, and the processing of step 042AKS013 is terminated. After such a judgment of the end of the special game state or time-saving state is executed, the special symbol stop processing is terminated. The end judgment based on the special symbol change count value may be performed only when the time-saving state is in effect, and the special game state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot." Alternatively, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for judging the end of the special game state may be extracted from a random counter provided in RAM 102, and a judgment of whether or not to end the special game state may be made by referring to a table for deciding the end of the special game state previously stored in ROM 101 or the like.

Figure 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 6 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 6. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is judged whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening count counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if they do not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if they match, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If the game is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 6.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the machine is not waiting for the next opening (step 042AKS027; No), the machine performs settings to open the large prize opening in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large prize opening number counter (step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value determined in advance in accordance with the large prize opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, and the large prize opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, is set. In addition, the solenoid drive signal for a specified large prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a specified solenoid circuit, and the large prize opening door solenoid is set to the ON state to open the large prize opening.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value of the special prize opening counter is between "1" and "15," the timer initial value corresponding to a special prize opening opening time of 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a command to specify that the large prize opening is in progress to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the processing of step 042AKS029, the large prize opening count value is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the processing during the large prize opening (step 042AKS031), and the processing before the large prize opening is terminated.

Figure 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of Figure 6 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in Figure 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot opening (step 042AKS041), for example, by determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. If no game ball has entered the jackpot opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the large prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning number count value by adding 1, and sets the main board 11 to send a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize opening to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), and then judges whether 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened, depending on whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds, for example (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not passed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large prize slot ends.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door to close the large prize opening is set to an off state (step 042AKS046), for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit, and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the pre-jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4 (including post-jackpot opening process and jackpot end process) are executed, and various performance control commands such as a win start command, a large prize opening open command, a prize winning command, and a large prize opening open command are set for transmission. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12, so that the performance control board 12 is aware of each timing such as the start of the jackpot, the opening (start of a round) and closing (end of a round) of the large prize opening, winning the large prize opening, and the end of the jackpot.

Figure 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processes performed in the jackpot performance process of step S176 in Figure 9. In the various display processes shown in Figure 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step 042AKS051). The jackpot end command is a command sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in Figure 6 that the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit number of times, and is a command to end the jackpot performance and execute the ending performance.

When it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round (nth round predetermined period has elapsed) (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is "1", which is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066 described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value when the round play starts, and when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round. More specifically, in response to the large prize winning port being completely opened (detection that the large prize winning port door has moved to a position where it is completely open), a large prize winning port open designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the timer value starts counting for the predetermined period from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the start of the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the side of the performance control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, a series of processes must be performed, which are to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is made too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for the winning of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the winning number display may display "0000", and the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up even though the winning has occurred ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball present at the top of the large prize winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the round number, a period is secured in which "0000" is not displayed as the winning number display, but "0015" is displayed directly. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing, and even if the period from firing to winning the large prize winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls fired continuously to win the large prize winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of balls that win the large prize winning port from the time the large prize winning port is opened until the winning number display is performed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings before the winning number display or the round number display is increased, which increases the winning number display at the time the round number display starts, giving the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period in the characteristic part 042AK is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, but the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the processing of step 042AKS066, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. In the processing of step 042AKS053, the value of n is checked to determine whether n=1.

If it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 performs a right-hit presentation that suggests to the player that he should hit the right, and controls the operation of a fanfare presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state has been reached (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the n-1R and the number of wins, and controls the operation of the jackpot presentation for that n-1R (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, if n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the processing of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a jackpot performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be preset.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning port within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than that during the performance during a big win. In addition, when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (1R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of balls won is displayed), the number of balls won is updated and displayed (step 042AKS060), and the various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, when updating the number of balls won in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as is, but rather a count-up display (announcement display of an increase in the number of balls won) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) before the number of balls won is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls won is increasing, which can increase the interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds and the number of wins corresponding to the nth round, and controls the operation of the presentation during the jackpot of that nth round (step 042AKS061). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the winning number is added by "15" in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, a count-up display (announcement display of the increase in the winning number) is performed as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), and then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), a winning number display (as a specific display) different from the predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased in the current big win (display of "0015") is performed (if the game is in a consecutive win, a display in which "15" is added to the winning number at the previous big win may be performed after the count-up). On the other hand, if a game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in the current big win, so a winning number display (display of "0000") indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed as a predetermined display as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22) (if the game is in a consecutive win, a display of the winning number at the previous big win may be performed). In addition, the acquisition number display (predetermined display) indicating that the acquisition number has not increased may be "0000", or may be displayed as a number other than numbers, such as "---" or "not increased". In addition, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a big win performance, and the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the big win performance, and a predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big win opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the acquisition number display is not performed, only the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated when the game ball enters the big win opening, but in a situation where the acquisition number display is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately illuminated, and the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the predetermined period. Therefore, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the presentation after the number of prizes won after the specified period is displayed can be made more exciting, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, since the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated at the same timing as the performance during a jackpot, the presentation can be made more exciting at the same time as the performance during a jackpot is executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). If a winning command has been received, i.e., if a winning has occurred in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) and then performs a winning number update display that displays the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that even though n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and presentation operation examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Figs. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the case of the so-called first win (first big win), not during a consecutive win.

Figure 10-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative patterns that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 10-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 10-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-hit performance, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (a-3) to Fig. 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 continues to display "right hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. Therefore, the following will explain the order in which the performance effect lamps 9 light up. When the right-hit performance starts, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning entrance vicinity lamp 9g located at the lower left of the play area lights up first, and then as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left part, lights up. Next, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-5), the left display device lower lamp 9fL of the display device lower lamps 9f located at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the play board 2 lights up, and then as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in Fig. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp 9eL corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left to the upper left of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), the large prize opening is closed, so the launched game medium will not enter the large prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7) shows the launched game ball passing through the second path above the large prize opening door and being guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the upper right lamp 9bR2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper right portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device lower lamp 9fR, which is one of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, lights up. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacca lamp 9c provided at the position near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the lower left side to the upper left side, then the center portion, then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, and a right-hit performance is performed in the performance effect lamp 9 that suggests to the player to hit right. In this example, both the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right hit, but either one may be used. Also, both may be lit independently, simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting only the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming machine frame 3 from the lower left to the center and then to the lower right, and lighting only the performance effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 from the lower left to the center and then to the lower right.

After the right-hit effect on the effect effect lamps 9 has ended, all effect effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues (the right-hit effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

When the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that even if a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened), it can still win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is less than 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined period. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after time has passed since the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17) without a prize being won, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, it is time to display the number of rounds corresponding to the first round and the big prize performance, and also to display the number of prizes won, so the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big prize hole before the specified period has elapsed, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is performed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20). At the same time as these displays, as a big win performance (first round performance), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the display of the decorative symbols that constitute the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative symbols that constitute the big win and the display of "BOUNUS" that are displayed as the big win performance (first round performance) are not shown (the same applies to FIG. 10-20 described later), but are displayed in a manner that suggests that the player should hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or right-hit effect is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-2), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is displayed facing forward, and a star-shaped image is displayed above the "B" in the "BOUNUS" display, as a big win effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is tilted toward the right back, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "O" in the "BOUNUS" display. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win faces forward, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, tilts toward the left rear, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "U" in the "BOUNUS" display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display, and the display returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot performance, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is moved toward the right rear, the front, and the left rear, and the star-shaped image is moved from the left character in the "BOUNUS" display to the right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right. The display of the movement of the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot and the shifting display of the star-shaped image are called effect displays, and effect displays also include, for example, a clockwise rotation of a specified image or a character gradually turning to the right. In other words, the effect display should be displayed in a manner that suggests a right hit. In this way, the effect display suggests that a right hit should be made, making it easier to recognize a right hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), in the big win performance, the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, a lighting pattern is set to alternately light the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 is not lit until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly hitting the ball and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball entering the big prize slot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached. In addition, with this winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of winnings is displayed as "0150" as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-24). In addition, with this winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). In addition, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a period that is sufficient to count from a predetermined period after 10 game balls have entered. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after release, and 28.9 seconds even after the specified period has passed. Since the interval between successive shots is 0.6 seconds, this period is sufficient to allow 10 wins. Therefore, players can feel at ease knowing that there is enough time to win.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 10-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the wins), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, the timing comes for the large prize opening to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6 in response to the second round, and the large prize opening is controlled to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). At this time, step 042AKS065 in FIG. 10-5 is judged as Yes, that is, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating the start of the n+1th round, is received, and the processing of 042AKS066 is executed, resulting in n=2. At this stage, the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the large prize presentation and round number display corresponding to the first round are performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26) (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely open and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 in FIG. 10-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, in response to the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 10-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during a predetermined period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large prize winning port is controlled to open in response to the second round, and as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-29), (b-29), and (c-29), if a predetermined period has passed since the large prize winning port was completely opened without a game ball winning, the number of winnings won in the first round will continue to be displayed as is, as shown in Fig. 10-14 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31). From then on, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that a winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of Fig. 10-5, a setting is made to end the large prize performance corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending performance. In this way, for the second round and onwards, if no winnings are won during the predetermined period, the winning number display displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, while if a winning is won during the predetermined period, the winning number display displayed in the previous round will be added to the winning number display displayed in the previous round and displayed. This makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot, even in the second round and beyond.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15. In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the game ball will win during the specified period of the first round. In this case, too, the attacca lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), and after the specified period has elapsed, a count-up display is performed and then "0015" is displayed as the number of wins, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21). In such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win again during the specified period (the second ball may win), and in that case, after the specified period has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21), a count-up display is performed, and then the winning number display directly shows "0030" instead of "0000" or "0015". This can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

The presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If a game ball does not enter the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period indicating that the number of winnings has not increased, and if a game ball enters the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a specific display of the number of winnings different from the predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by displaying a specific display if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a count-up display as a notification display that the number of prizes has increased, and then displays the number of prizes displayed as a special display: "0015." This makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and that the number of prizes is increasing.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the large prize opening is when the large prize opening is completely open, that is, when the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11. This counts the specified period from when the large prize opening is completely open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, even if a game ball (a game ball that has been thrown quickly) is released by performing a right-hit performance before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if it is above the large prize opening when the large prize opening is opened, it can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the performance control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that have been thrown quickly from going to waste.

For example, if the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the final round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-15, the large prize game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a fanfare presentation to suggest that a jackpot game state has been reached during the time when the jackpot opening changes from a closed state to an open state. After the jackpot opening is opened and a specified period of time has passed, the number of rounds played can be displayed along with the number of wins, and a jackpot presentation corresponding to round play can be executed. This can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-12(c-23). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (similar to step 042AKS064) to light up in a manner (a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times per unit time that game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that light up during the jackpot performance. This makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the jackpot opening, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple round play.

In addition, when a round of play from the second round onwards is being played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31), while if the gaming medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, it adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to that winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize a winning entry into the large prize opening even in the second round onwards.

In addition, even if an over-winning occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) and displays the number of winnings of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are displayed next, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it is opened corresponding to the second round. This makes it easy to determine which opening the winning corresponds to, since the update of the number of winnings display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the number of winnings display at the time of the next opening.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the attacca lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 10-6, and after the big prize opening is opened, the effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit to suggest a right hit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to suggest a right hit after the big prize opening is opened, the last lighted attakka lamp 9c may be left lit as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15) without being turned off, and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a specified period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the presentation control CPU 120 illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to, and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 10-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 10-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning port becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and after. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and the game can be made more interesting.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the maximum number of winning balls during the period in which the large winning port can be opened is 10 (the maximum number of winning balls is 10), but for example, the maximum number of winning balls may be set to 1, and if 2 balls are won during the specified period before the number of rounds is displayed, it may be considered an over winning ball. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound may be output as the winning sound for an over winning ball during the specified period (over winning sound), and the attacca lamp 9c may be illuminated in a manner indicating the occurrence of an over winning ball.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning number display counted the number of game balls entering the jackpot, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot may also be counted. Note that since right-handed shots are performed during a jackpot, the general winning port into which the winning ball is entered is the general winning port 10 located above the variable winning ball device 6B. Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in which winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that explanations of parts similar to those in Figure 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if a winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if no winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation when the winning of the general winning opening 10 is also counted will be described with reference to Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the large winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-19 are the same as (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-10. When the large winning opening is opened as shown in the figure, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, the state transitions to the state shown in Fig. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning port 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or after time has passed without the game ball entering either the large winning port or the general winning port 10 from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17), and after a predetermined period has passed as shown in FIG. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A), and (c-19A), if the game ball enters the general winning port 10, the state transitions to the state shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is performed. Also, at the same time as these displays, as a big win during performance (first round during performance), as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the decorative pattern constituting the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and the character are displayed. During the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of wins.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without a game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the winning number display. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the jackpot performance (first round performance) includes the display of decorative patterns that constitute the jackpot, the display "BOUNUS in progress" and a character, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the jackpot performance.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, as in the above embodiment, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning port 10. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number display corresponding to the winning is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
A display of the amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, by displaying the number of winnings),
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the gaming medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a win occurs within a specified period, a specific display is displayed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displays "0015" instead of "0000");
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from becoming confused and losing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the game value has been awarded, and then performs a display according to the awarded game value as the specific display (for example, a count-up display which is a notification display indicating that the number of winnings is increasing, and then displays "0015").
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that they have won a prize and the number of prizes they have won is increasing.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The display means starts displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, starts counting a timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving a command to specify that the large winning port is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the specified period is counted appropriately, and if a win occurs within the specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variable winning means includes a path forming means including a first path that guides the game medium to the winning path when the first state is reached (for example, by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening), and a second path that guides the game medium to the discharge path when the second state is reached (for example, by closing the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path), and a detection means (for example, a count switch 23, etc.) that is formed within the winning path and detects the winning of the game medium,
The time taken for the game medium to travel from the path forming means to the detection means is within the predetermined period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time taken for a game ball present at the large winning port door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is within the predetermined period of 0.6 seconds, etc.)
This may be done.

This configuration increases the likelihood that a gaming ball present above the large prize opening will be detected within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
After the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state, an operation prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation (for example, during the period from when a jackpot is hit until the big winning port is opened, a right-hit display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-3) to display that the player should hit right),
This may be done.

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed during advantageous states, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first state is a state in which the variable prize winning door included in the variable prize winning means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize winning opening is a state in which the large prize winning opening is completely open, that is, the large prize winning opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and in response to detecting that the large prize winning opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, a large prize winning opening open command is transmitted from the main board 11 side).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the specified period is counted from the time the big prize opening is fully open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
If the game medium launched by the operation prompting display before the start of the first round of play in the advantageous state wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, if a game ball launched by a right-hit performance before the start of the first round is capable of winning at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if the game medium wins within the predetermined period, the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period, etc.)
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent game media that are released before a round of play begins from going to waste.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
In the final round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium being caught when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, in the final round, the big win game state ends with the eleventh game ball caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15), etc.),
When the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round of play after the advantageous state is again established, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed if the game medium in the clamped state wins a prize in the variable winning means (for example, when the next jackpot is hit, the game ball wins a prize in a jackpot opening at the start of the first round, and the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the game has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the time when the large prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect that suggests that the game has entered a large prize game state), and together with the start of the display of the award amount after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round during performance corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening is opened and a specified period has elapsed, it is possible to display the number of rounds together with the number of prizes won, and execute a large prize during performance corresponding to the round game).

This configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, by displaying the number of winnings),
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the gaming medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display),
A light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9, etc.);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means with a light emission pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium when the game medium wins the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins a big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also makes it easier for the player to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period of time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) that is located near the variable winning means and emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.),
When a game medium wins on the variable winning means, the specific light-emitting means emits light more frequently per unit time than the predetermined light-emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is made to emit light in a manner (a manner in which a win is notified) that is more frequent than the light emission per unit time of game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that emits light during the performance during a jackpot).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.);
The sound output means includes:
outputting a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the game medium wins on the variable winning means;
The winning sound is output both when the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball enters a large winning hole, the winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
A display of the amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, by displaying the number of winnings),
A round game display capable of identifying the round game being played (for example, displaying the number of rounds) can be displayed;
When the first of the multiple round games is played, the award amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the round number display and the number of wins display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
When the second or subsequent round game is played among the multiple round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the large winning port was opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the gaming medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and increases the chances that consecutively shot game balls will win a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple rounds of play.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the game medium does not win a prize in the variable prize winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable prize winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed (for example, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the game medium does not win a prize in the large prize winning port within a predetermined period of time after the large prize winning port is opened, the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31)).
When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the amount of the winning amount according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added to the amount of the winning amount displayed in the previous round of play and displayed (for example, if a gaming medium wins in the large winning port within a predetermined period of time, the number of winning balls awarded in response to the winning is added to the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30)).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
the display means is capable of updating and displaying the displayed award amount display in response to the winning of the gaming medium on the variable winning means;
The update display of the award amount display is completed once the variable winning means has changed from the first state to the second state, and before it returns to the first state (for example, the count-up display and the winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it becomes an open state corresponding to the second round, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the update of the winning number display when one opening occurs does not overlap with the update of the winning number display when the next opening occurs, making it easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning prize.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the gaming medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display),
A plurality of light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9, etc.);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means to emit more light when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, but when the number of winnings after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and the performance effect lamp 9 is emitted more than during the predetermined period, etc.).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of wins is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is controlled to the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, a right-hit display can be displayed),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) that is located near the variable winning means and emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the specific light-emitting means is illuminated while the specific light-emitting means is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display, and when the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed, the specific light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means are illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in Figs. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit-up attakka lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15) but is kept lit).
This may be done.

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media wins, and the game moves to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached).
The time from when the predetermined period has elapsed until when the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning port can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted from when the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win),
This may be done.

This configuration gives players a sense of security because it guarantees them sufficient time to win.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media wins, and the game moves to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached).
The time from when the predetermined period has elapsed until when the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number of games (for example, with respect to the upper limit period during which a large winning port can be opened, the counting from when the predetermined period has elapsed is a sufficient period for 10 game balls to win),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, if the display of the amount of prize awarded before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the light emitting means is caused to emit light only after the display of the amount of prize awarded after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed (for example, until the large prize opening is opened and the predetermined period has elapsed, i.e., until the number of prizes won is displayed, the performance effect lamp 9 is not caused to emit light as shown in Figs. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), and the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light only after the display of the number of prizes won after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed, as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22)).
This may be done.

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, a suggestion effect can be executed to suggest that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round-in-play effect corresponding to the round game can be executed (for example, a round number display, an acquisition number display, and a jackpot-in-play effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the in-round performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the big win performance),
This may be done.

This configuration allows the performance to be instantly heightened when the mid-round performance is executed, increasing interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The game machine further includes a general winning means (such as a general winning port 10) through which the game medium can be won,
The display means includes:
The amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning at the general winning means can be displayed as the award amount display (for example, a winning number display can be displayed in response to the winning at the general winning port 10).
If the gaming medium does not win in the general winning means within the specified period, a specified display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if no gaming ball wins in the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded).
If a gaming medium wins in the general winning means within the specified period, a display corresponding to the winning in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if a gaming ball wins in the general winning port 10 during a specified period after the large winning port is opened, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning port 10).
This may be done.

With this configuration, even if a player wins a general prize during a specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize is also displayed, preventing players from feeling anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area),
The display means includes:
A first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a big win) can be displayed at the same timing as the display of the amount of the award,
The first image is displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the amount of the award during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a jackpot, etc.),
The effect display is displayed in a manner suggesting the predetermined area (for example, the effect display is such that a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot is moved to the right rear, the front, and the left rear, suggesting a right hit, etc.)
This may be done.

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and comprising a display means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5), a variable winning means (such as a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the gaming medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a control that can execute a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when controlled to the advantageous state. The display means has a display area capable of displaying images, and is capable of displaying game-related information relating to the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) in the display area (for example, the image display device 5), and is capable of displaying an amount of award relating to the amount of game value awarded to the variable winning means as a result of the game medium winning (for example, displaying the number of winnings, etc.). ), when the first of the multiple rounds of play is performed, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the winning number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port has been opened, and if the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display), and if the gaming medium does not win the When a win is won on the variable winning means, a specific display different from the specific display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display), and when the specific display is displayed, a count-up display is performed to indicate that the gaming value has been awarded, and then a display according to the awarded gaming value is performed as the specific display (for example, a count-up display is performed as a notification display that the acquired number is increasing, and then "0015" is displayed), and further, a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the gaming-related information are displayed. a storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least the above, a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) capable of arranging images based on the image data, and an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers, and a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 is a portion for executing the variable display during performance process shown in FIGS. 14-17 ), the storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is configured to store, in a specific display layer, a displaced specific image can be generated by displacing the specific image arranged based on the display position displacement information based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and an image for displacement is applied to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance); The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) that displays the displacing specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is performed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety. In addition, a count-up display is performed when the specific display is displayed, making it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and the number of wins will increase. In addition, a displaced specific image in which at least a portion of the specific image displayed in the specified performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to when the image data of these displaced specific images are stored exclusively. In addition, when the specific performance is executed, the display image of the game-related information is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the specific image, preventing a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In other words, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (if no prize is won within the predetermined period) or a specific display (if a prize is won within the predetermined period) is displayed as the prize amount display, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game, allowing the specific performance to be executed with a small amount of data, and preventing a decline in visibility of the display image of the game-related information when the specific performance is executed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decline in interest in the game when installed in an amusement facility and can execute the specific performance with a small amount of data without reducing the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming, and can execute specific effects with a small amount of data while preventing a decrease in visibility of the display image of the gaming-related information, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can execute variable display, has a display area in which images can be displayed, and in the display area, a display means (e.g., an image display device 5) that can display display images (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J) of gaming-related information relating to the progress of the game (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, a small symbol that has a smaller display area than the decorative symbol), and a specific image (e.g., a decorative symbol or a background image) displayed in the display area and the display image of the gaming-related information can be displayed with a small amount of data. a storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including both the first and second images and the second image, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5, in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing the images arranged in the plurality of display layers, and a performance execution means (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 14-17) capable of executing a performance to display the specific image in the display area, and the storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area to a first position (e.g., a characteristic portion 006S The image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data from the central part of the display area of the image display device 5 if the feature portion is 006SG) to a second position different from the first position (for example, an upper or lower position of the display area of the image display device 5 if the feature portion is 006SG) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement target image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). A part that creates an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as a display image), the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature part 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority). Below, an example of an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described as another example of the form.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 11 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 11 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 11 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "jackpot" or "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling due to the setting value. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a portion for generating a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 006SG, a reach suggestion effect in the modified example 006SG-1, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a foresight notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6) that displays the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a specific performance can be executed by displacing the display position of a specific image from a first position to a second position simply by using image data for displaying a specific image in the display area and display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Therefore, the amount of data to be stored in the memory means for executing a specific performance can be reduced compared to when a specific performance is executed using dedicated image data.

The gaming machine of aspect A2 is the gaming machine according to aspect A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific effect is being executed, the display position of the game-related information does not shift along with at least a portion of the specific image, thereby preventing the game-related information from becoming difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect A3 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced but is displayed overlapping the displaced specific image, so that the player can recognize the game-related information without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of aspect A4 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area of the display area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even when the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displaced specific image, so that the player can accurately recognize the game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
The game device includes a game identifier variable display execution means (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identifiers (for example, special symbols),
The performance execution means includes:
In a first region within the display region, a variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the game identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in a central portion of the display region of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of a special pattern can be executed);
In a second area in the display area that is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, a variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the gaming identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol can be executed);
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged on the specific display layer, and the visibility state changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state which is more difficult for the player to see than the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion performance is executed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility).
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged on the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-21 and 14-23, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, when the development suggestion performance is executed, the small symbols do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the visibility is not reduced).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of a specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the effect identification information from a first visual state to a second visual state when a specific effect is executed, and since the visual state of the reduced identification information does not change from the first visual state when a specific effect is executed, a player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually checking the reduced identification information even while a specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 14-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B shown in FIG. 14-31),
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
When the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced, an effect image (for example, a cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 14-31) different from the images displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displayed at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a special effect can be more effectively recognized by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A7 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6,
The performance execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction and displacing the second specific display area in a second direction opposite to the first direction, as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T to the right and the lower area 006SG005B to the left, and as shown in FIG. 14-31(E), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T upward and the lower area 006SG005B downward).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific performance can be executed as a displacement of the first specific display area in a first direction and a displacement of the second specific display area in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction, thereby further improving the effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6 or A7,
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific performance are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further improve the presentation effect of specific presentations.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than a decorative pattern or a background image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image is displaced as a specific performance, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, by contrasting the specific image with the effect image, the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more prominent, thereby further improving the performance effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors, blue and red, and as shown in FIG. 14-33, a portion capable of displaying the cutting effect image 006SG005S in three colors, blue, green, and red);
The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 14-33, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the special presentation, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes gradually (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, a part in which the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases gradually; as shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, a part in which the decorative pattern in the middle gradually expands and the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases; as shown in FIG. 14-35, in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5, a part in which the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific image changes gradually, thereby improving the presentation effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern in the middle gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area, as well as the portion in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5 where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of a specific image from a first position to a second position in a specific presentation can be emphasized, thereby further increasing the interest of the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image fragments (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, a portion in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of fragments),
The specific performance is a performance in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases stepwise (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-2, a part in which the number of pieces constituting the decorative pattern in the middle increases stepwise as the revival performance progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of the image pieces gradually increasing can leave a strong impression on the player of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area increases stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the part in which the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 increases stepwise in the revival effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the total display area increases stepwise, so that the player's attention can be more effectively drawn to the specific effects.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of pieces of image data for displacement are stored in the CGROM 206);
The proportion of the specific image controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information the specific image is displaced based on (for example, in a variable display in a super reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding and moving the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the third stage is used, whereas in a variable display in a normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding and moving the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage is used, so that the proportion of the specific image controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the specific image changes during the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first state to a second state different from the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R to the third stage), and second display position change information in which the specific image does not change from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a normal reach, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R to the first or second stage).
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change part for changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect by the image processing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 and FIG. 14-22, in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the third stage is used, and in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the first stage is used, the difference between ... The portions where the images in the left region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common between the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage is used and the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the second stage is used,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first state to the second state as a specific effect, thereby further increasing the interest in the specific effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left-right direction).
After the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D) and FIG. 14-31(E), after the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the specific presentation and increasing interest in the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A18 is the gaming machine according to aspect A17,
The boundary between the first specific display region and the second specific display region is displaceable in a direction different from that of at least one of the multiple display regions including the first specific display region and the second specific display region (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D) and FIG. 14-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific presentation can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the multiple display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of aspect A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, images can be arranged across an area corresponding to the display area and outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-39, when performing a promotion performance, a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a displaced specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, the risk of an inappropriate display being performed in the display area can be reduced.
In addition, in variant example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when executing a promotion performance (specific performance), an example is given of form A in which an image for the promotion performance is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, in other words, it is not necessary to displace the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of aspect A20 is the gaming machine of aspect A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging the image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, a part that gradually enlarges a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area according to the progress of the promotion effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area during the process leading up to the display of the displaced specific image, while maintaining the effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special effects can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine of any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displaced specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are the same (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left are in common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A23 is the gaming machine according to aspect A21 or A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is not displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the displaced specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-3, a part of the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is not displayed as an image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as the pre-reading preview performance).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further increase the interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, a portion in which a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5′ is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) composed of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image));
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(B), a portion in which a variable display preview effect can be displayed in a stereoscopic image),
When the specific performance is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(D), when a development suggestion performance is executed, an image displayed as the development suggestion performance is displayed as a planar image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stereoscopic presentation can increase the player's interest, and since a displaced specific image is not displayed as a stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be implemented in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A25 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24,
the right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged on a stereoscopic display layer in which arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific performance is executed, a stereoscopic performance can be executed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect A26 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24 or A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introduction performance of the specific performance during a period prior to the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution of the stereoscopic effect allows the player to be aware in advance that a specific effect will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the specific effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, RAM 122, display control unit 123, etc. In the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives performance control commands via the input circuit 260. Based on the performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 also performs processing to cause the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the display control unit 123 constitutes a display control circuit together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as characters (image data of people, animals, letters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) and decorative patterns, background images, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns for displaying a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the number of reserved first special patterns as game-related information in this feature unit 006SG, and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the number of reserved second special patterns, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area are stored.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read out the necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 is a ROM for storing in advance the character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, the image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. Note that the CGROM 205 in this characteristic unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the data to the displacement target image described later. The display control unit 123 reads out the image data from the CGROM 205 according to the command of the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is an integrated circuit equipped with a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, an attribute register 203 in which attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, data specifying the character drawing order, number of colors, zoom ratio, palette number, coordinates, etc.) are stored, a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in a drawing area of the VRAM area described later, a data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer of CG data stored in the CGROM 205 to the VRAM area, a display control unit 213 that outputs video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) and synchronization signals for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area of the VRAM area described later, and a DA converter 214 that converts the video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal and outputs it to the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 includes a system bus and a CG bus, which are connected to the performance control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and to an image processing DSP 264 to which an infrared camera 60 is connected. The CG bus is further connected to a CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

The drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are also connected to the system bus, and are able to access the system register 202. The drawing control unit 206 and data transfer control unit 211 are also connected to the CG bus, and are able to access the CG ROM 205 and attribute register 203.

A VRAM bus is also provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system registers 202 include a system control register that stores commands for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores commands for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing register that stores the drawing area in the VRAM area and the area where palette data is placed, a data transfer register that stores the source address and destination address when transferring data, and a display register that stores the display image creation area in the VRAM area.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V-blank interrupt signal to the performance control CPU 120 at the start of each V-blank (image update period), and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this characteristic part 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and in the next V blank, it is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In particular, as shown in Figures 14-2(a) and 14-2(b), this characteristic section 006SG generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area (see Figure 14-5). Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), the VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, which will be described later, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image (described later) is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5.

In other words, Layer 1 is the top layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the bottom layer with the lowest image display priority.

As shown in Figures 14-2 (b) and 14-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing these images to display a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the first reserved memory number of special patterns and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the second reserved memory number of special patterns at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image 006SG005J that includes a small pattern that is smaller in display area than the decorative pattern at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this characteristic part 006SG, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5 because they have the highest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5 because it has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is displayed as the lowest image in the image display device 5 because it has the lowest display priority.

In this characteristic section 006SG, the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area are set to a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

Next, we will explain the method of displacing the image to be displaced in this characteristic part 006SG. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the image for displacement to be applied to the image to be displaced has multiple pixels having red component values (R values) and green component values (G values) arranged therein. These R values and G values each have a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking pixel A as an example, the display control unit 123 identifies the position of pixel X to be displaced from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image based on the R and G values of pixel A. Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the negative direction (leftward) of the X axis as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the positive direction (rightward) of the X axis as the coordinate of pixel X in the X axis direction. The amount of movement in the X axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

If the G value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate of pixel X, and if the G value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate (position) of pixel X. Note that the amount of movement in the Y axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is the difference from 128, which is the median G value.

Then, once the position of pixel X in the displacement target image has been identified, pixel X is designated as the pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature part 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and by adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A to the same value, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X that is the same distance away from the position corresponding to pixel A to a position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for multiple pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), the displacement image is composed of multiple regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image d) with different R and G values, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in Fig. 14-4(A) to Fig. 14-4(C), the following regions are provided that make up the displacement image: displacement image a with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 1 to 127; displacement image b with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256; displacement image c with an R value of any one of 1 to 127 and a G value of 128; and displacement image d with an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128. The image of the triple circle is the image to be displaced.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 14-4(D), for displacement image a, the range in the displacement target image that is moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image a is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(E), for displacement image b, the range in the displacement target image that is moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image b is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(F), for displacement image c, the range in the displacement target image that is moved left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image c is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(G), for displacement image d, the range in the displacement target image that is moved right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image d is specified as the display range in the displacement image.

As described above, by displacing the specified range from the image to be displaced to the positions of displacement images a, b, c, and d using the R and G values of displacement images a, b, c, and d, a displacement image such as that shown in Figure 14-4 (H) is generated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, the boundaries between displacement images a, b, c, and d are clearly defined by setting either the R value or the G value of each of displacement images a, b, c, and d to a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of the pixels near each boundary between displacement images a, b, c, and d.

Figure 14-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 006SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-6 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-8 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 006SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 006SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 006SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 006SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 14-9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 006SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 006SG will be explained using FIG. 14-9 (B). In this feature section 006SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 006SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-10 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, in this feature section 006SG, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only one type may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 006SG include Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2), and Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3).

As shown in Figure 14-10, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β change pattern is set to be longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α change pattern. In other words, the Super Reach β change pattern is set to have a higher chance of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" than the Super Reach α change pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are also variation patterns that execute a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect after a reach is established during the variable display. In the normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed after the development suggestion effect is executed without developing into a super reach reach effect, while in the super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the super reach reach effect is executed after the development suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are exemplified as examples of a form in which a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect is executed after a reach is established during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and between the normal reach fluctuation patterns and the super reach fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation pattern in which a development suggestion effect is not executed may be set.In addition, when a development suggestion effect is executed, the rate of development to a super reach reach effect may be set higher than when a development suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 006SG. In this feature part 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern's variable display has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%; PA2-1 at a rate of 40%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%; PA2-1 at a rate of 30%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the type of big win, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reserved data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 14-1 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area. The performance control data storage area shown in Figure 14-15 (A) has a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer is stored in a specified area of the performance control buffer setting section. The start winning time receiving command buffer has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Figure 14-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 14-12, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 14-8 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 14-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 14-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (step 006SGS164).

If the judgment in step 006SGS161 indicates that the jackpot flag is not set to the ON state (step 006SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns (step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 006SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 006SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 006SGS174), and proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 006SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 006SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a "reach" state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 006SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 006SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 14-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the game is in a high base state, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the program proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the program clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 006SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figures 14-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figures 14-16 are part of the flowchart of the performance control process shown in Figure 13. In the performance control process, after executing the above-mentioned advance notice setting process (step S161), the performance control CPU 120 executes a background image change process (step 006SG162) to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5, and then executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S175.

As a background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 decides to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%) at the start of the variable display (the timing at which the performance control process process is executed with the performance control process flag value set to 1), and starts displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in response to this decision. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any of a number of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is variable displayed and a performance corresponding to the variable display is executed.

In addition, in the background image change process, when the game state changes (for example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state, from the jackpot game state to the special state or the time-saving state, or from the special state or the time-saving state to the jackpot state or the normal state), the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the new game state on the image display device 5.

Figure 14-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display during performance processing of the performance control process. In the variable display during performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements by 1 the values of the process timer corresponding to the process table selected by the performance control CPU 120 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting processing, the variable display time timer set by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting processing, and the variable display control timer (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to create image data for the next display screen for the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switch of the decorative patterns) (step 006SGS922). The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), it is further determined whether the display image processing flag described below is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926. If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the process checks the contents of the process data being executed to determine whether it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926.

In step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process to process (displace) a portion of the image to be displayed on the image display device 5, and then proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 in the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of the decorative pattern is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image in which an image such as the set background image is superimposed on an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the changing decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 006SG is a part of the background image, a first interface image 006SG005I, a second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern, the positions of which have been adjusted in advance so as to be displayed in the display area. In particular, the background image in this characteristic part 006SG is drawn as an image longer in the left-right and up-down directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays the center part of the background image in the left-right direction. In other words, in this characteristic part 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are areas for drawing and arranging an image that is longer in the up-down and left-right dimensions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only the part of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an example is shown in which the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area may be areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, while the display image creation area may be an image for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. In this case, the background image can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by arranging only the parts of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area that correspond to the display area of the image display device 5 in the display image creation area.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control shifts to one that stops the fluctuation. Therefore, even if a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards or the like is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern ends).

Figure 14-18 is a flow chart showing the display image processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display performance processing shown in Figure 14-17. In the display image processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on or not (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it determines whether the variable display being executed is a variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942; Y), it selects the displacement image data for successful development to the Super Reach performance (for announcing the execution of the Super Reach performance) and proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The displacement image data in this characteristic part 006SG is data in which displacement images to be applied to the displacement target image (in the case of this characteristic part 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (an image arranged in the displacement image creation area)) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, if the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance or the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance as the displacement image data for failed development of a super reach performance (for notifying of non-execution of a super reach performance) (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%.

Note that, in this feature section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which two displacement image data can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance: displacement image data A for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance and displacement image data B for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be three or more displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS946). If the selection of the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, it selects the first displacement image from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949) and proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Also, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the performance control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the performance control CPU 120 executes a displacement image drawing process. In this displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 creates a displacement target image by, for example, synthesizing (superimposing) an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5 in the displacement image creation area, and executes a process of creating a displacement image by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image can be determined, for example, by whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off and the display image processing process is terminated (step 006SGS953); if the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative symbols in this characteristic section 006SG will be described with reference to Figs. 14-20 to 14-23. First, as shown in Figs. 14-20(A) and 14-20(B), in this characteristic section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the game state. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 14-20(A), when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a normal state decorative symbol combining a character image and a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 14-20(B), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), a time-saving state decorative symbol consisting of only a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol.

In the variable display with the Super Reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-21 (A) and 14-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. In the development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 14-21 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing a development notification pattern (the pattern labeled "Development!" shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E)) to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5, indicating that the development will progress to a Super Reach reach performance.

The development notification pattern in this feature part 006SG is a pattern that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is being executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 14-21 (C), the second stage shown in Figure 14-21 (D), and the third stage shown in Figure 14-21 (E).

Then, when the third stage of sliding of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the development notification symbol moves to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C), and the development of the Super Reach into a Reach performance is announced.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As a development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 14-22 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 14-22(C) to 14-22(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing the development notification pattern, which notifies the player that the game will develop into a Super Reach reach performance, to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 14-22 (C) and the second stage shown in Figure 14-22 (D).

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R has been executed, or after the second stage of sliding movement has been executed, as shown in FIG. 14-22(E), the development suggestion performance ends without the third stage of sliding movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 14-22(B), and the decorative patterns and small patterns stop in a combination indicating a miss.

As shown in Fig. 14-21(C) to Fig. 14-21(E), in this characteristic portion 006SG, the sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R increases as the stages progress, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may decrease as the stages progress, or the movement amount may increase or decrease only in one of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid up to three levels as a development suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of levels by which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid as a development suggestion effect may be two levels or less or four levels or more.

As shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this characteristic part 006SG, the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is exemplified as being opposite to that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R may be the same as that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, an example has been given of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 for development suggestion effects when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for development suggestion effects when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state).

As shown in Fig. 14-23(A) to Fig. 14-23(E), the development suggestion performance in this characteristic part 006SG is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a background image is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In other words, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in both the case of variable display of the normal reach variation pattern and the case of variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and are therefore asymmetrical in displacement. For this reason, while the decorative symbols move upward or downward as a development suggestion performance toward the top or bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, reducing visibility to the player, the first interface image 006SG005I remains displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second interface image 006SG005J remains displayed at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J does not decrease.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern is set to a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature part 006SG, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion presentation of this feature part 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains a left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains a middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains a right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right decorative patterns, including the characters and numbers, slide along without being separated, preventing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns from being separated, which reduces the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Note that, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic section 006SG, specific effects that displace the display positions of the decorative symbols and background images (development suggestion effects in characteristic section 006SG, reach suggestion effects in variant 006SG-1, revival effects in variant 006SG-2, foresight notice effects in variant 006SG-3, promotion effects in variant 006SG-5, and temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in variant 006SG-6) can be executed simply by using image data for displaying the decorative symbols and background images and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative symbols and background images, so the amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to when these specific effects are executed using dedicated data.

In particular, since this feature section 006SG is capable of displaying multiple images as background images on the image display device 5, it would normally be necessary to store in advance in CGROM 205 a presentation pattern for a specific presentation depending on when each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. However, with this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced simply by using data for the displacement image, so the amount of data stored in CGROM 205 can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, as game-related information, a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D capable of identifying the number of reserved first special symbols, a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U capable of identifying the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as game-related information, a launch promotion display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or gate 41 because the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state, or a fourth pattern that can identify that a variable display is being executed, etc. may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority. In other words, they are asymmetric images for image displacement in the development suggestion performance in this feature part 006SG. Therefore, their display positions do not shift with the images in the left area 006SG005L, right area 006SG005R, and middle area 006SG005C, which are the objects of displacement, and it is possible to prevent game-related information, such as the number of reserved special symbols and the variable display of small symbols, from being difficult for the player to see when the development suggestion performance is being executed.

Furthermore, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R which slides upward during the development suggestion performance, but since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not displace, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without feeling any discomfort. On the other hand, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, so the player can accurately recognize the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D, which identifiably displays the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U, which identifiably displays the second reserved memory number in a manner that allows the player to accurately recognize the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility and improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect. Furthermore, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by viewing the small symbols even when a development suggestion effect is being performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature part 006SG gradually increases the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R, improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect while emphasizing the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, thereby further improving the presentation effect.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the super reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Therefore, the proportion of the jackpot game state controlled varies depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion presentation. This allows the player to focus on the number of stages of movement of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion presentation, thereby increasing the presentation interest of the development suggestion presentation.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, and the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, When using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage, the part in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is the same as when using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the number of stages, etc., that the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage as a development suggestion presentation, thereby further increasing the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 14-24 and 14-25 as modified example 006SG-1, a reach suggestion effect that suggests that a reach will occur during the variable display may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the reach suggestion presentation will be explained based on Figures 14-24 and 14-25. First, in the variable display with the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach, as shown in Figures 14-24(A) to 14-24(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-24(D) to 14-24(F), just before the right decorative symbol stops, an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol, causing the right decorative symbol to stop and reach a winning state. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative symbol is displayed distorted.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-25(A) to 14-25(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-25(D) to 14-25(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern just before the right decorative pattern stops, but the right decorative pattern stops in a number of patterns that do not result in a reach combination. At this time, the right decorative pattern stops and a reach is reached. At this time, the part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

As shown in Fig. 14-26(A) to Fig. 14-26(F), the reach indication performance in this modified example 006SG-1 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-1 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of a form in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to execute a reach suggestion effect in some of the variable displays of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example of a reach suggestion effect is shown in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reach suggestion effect in a variable display of a non-reach variation pattern, it is also possible to provide a case in which the action image acts on the decorative symbols only once (only acting on the left decorative symbol).

Moreover, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of an action image such as a character acting on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple action images can be displayed as reach suggestion effects, and the rate at which a reach occurs can be varied depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, in the case where an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect but the reach does not occur, an example is given in which the decorative pattern that acted and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are not distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern that the action image acted on and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may always be distorted regardless of whether the reach occurs or not.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern affected by the action image and a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, only one of the decorative pattern affected by the action image and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may be distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-27 and 14-28 as modified example 006SG-2, a revival effect in which a decorative pattern that was once stopped and displayed as a losing combination changes into a winning combination may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the revival presentation will be explained based on Fig. 14-27 and Fig. 14-28. First, when the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Fig. 14-27 (A), the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach presentation of a normal reach or super reach, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 14-27(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

Then, as the fourth stage of cracking, an image of the fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering and scattering is displayed, after which a new decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, and the variable display stops.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figure 14-28 (A), after the reach effect of a normal reach or super reach suggests that the variable display result is a miss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a swaying manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the center, and the decorative pattern in the center is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 14-28(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

However, in a variable display where the variable display result is a miss, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, the fourth stage crack is not executed, the revival performance ends, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in Figure 14-28 (A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop in a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in Figures 14-29(A) to 14-29(F), the revival performance in this modified example 006SG-2 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a crack effect image 006SG005H in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-2 for drawing images lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created from the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image (an image in which the decorative pattern inside is split into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it is diffusing).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, in this modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands as a revival effect. In other words, in the revival effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside to the display area of the image display device 5 increases gradually, so that the gradual expansion of the decorative pattern inside makes it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the revival effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is superimposed on the decorative pattern in the middle as a revival performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the crack effect image 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, blue and red are set as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more colors may be used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, an example is given of a form in which a revival effect is executed when the game state is in a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival effect may also be executed when the game state is in a normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the decorative pattern in the revival performance is composed of multiple fragments, and as the revival performance progresses, the number of fragments is maintained while these fragments move in stages from the center to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle may increase in stages as the revival performance progresses. In this way, the visual effect of the number of fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle increasing as the revival performance progresses makes it possible to leave a strong impression of the revival performance on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-31 as modified example 006SG-3, an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be a look-ahead preview effect that suggests from a variable display several times ago that a variable display will be executed in the variable pattern of a Super Reach in the reserved memory, or that a variable display that results in a jackpot will be executed.

The performance mode of the pre-reading preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-31. First, in a state where there are multiple reserved memories, as shown in FIG. 14-31(A) and FIG. 14-31(B), the variable display in progress stops with a combination of decorative symbols that is a miss. Next, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C) and FIG. 14-31(D), when the next variable display starts, in the display area of the image display device 5, the cutting effect image 006SG005S that crosses the display area from left to right is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols and background image. Then, the display area displayed on the image display device 5, excluding the first interface image 006SG005I, is divided into a lower area 006SG005B below including the decorative symbols and part of the background image and an upper area 006SG005T above including the remaining decorative symbols and background image, with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the boundary. In other words, the boundary between the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T above is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

As shown in Figures 14-31(D) to 14-31(E), the lower region 006SG005B simultaneously slides left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T simultaneously slides right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The lower region 006SG005B, which has slid left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, then slides downward, while the upper region 006SG005T, which has slid right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed moving so as to follow the boundary on both the lower region 006SG005B side and the upper region 006SG005T side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-31(E) and FIG. 14-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the display of a black image begins with the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T. The display area of the black image expands as the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T progresses, and when the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T have completed moving out of the display area, the display area appears in a so-called blacked-out state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

After this, when the blackout ends, a new background image and decorative pattern will begin to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. This pre-reading preview performance will be repeated until the variable display of the outer pre-reading target begins.

As shown in Fig. 14-32(A) to Fig. 14-32(F), the preview performance in this modified example 006SG-3 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images even lower. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image including a lower area 006SG005B and an upper area 006SG005T is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the look-ahead preview performance as a specific performance of the present invention, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, so that the player can more effectively recognize the left and right lateral movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the look-ahead preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and positioned in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and background image, so even if the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B are displaced, the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not displace. Therefore, by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the displacement of the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B can be made more prominent, further improving the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), by moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, and then further moving the boundaries between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation can be further enhanced and the presentation interest can be increased. In particular, as shown in Figures 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, so the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-reading preview.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is an up-down direction different from the right side, which is the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from either the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T or the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-reading preview performance, and the lower area 006SG005B and upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are displayed movingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result in the pre-reading target variable display becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, three colors, blue, green, and red, are set as the display colors for the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 10% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 60% of the time. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a miss, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 60% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 10% of the time.

By doing this, the player can be drawn to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S that is displayed during the preview performance, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the preview performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, three colors, blue, green, and red, are used as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. In addition, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot probability) may be changed depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the number of cutting effect images 006SG005S displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is given of the image displayed on the image display device 5 being divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-reading preview performance. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area that moves as a pre-reading preview performance may be only one of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B, so that the pre-reading preview performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left may be the same. In this way, an element of surprise can be added to the pre-reading preview performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is the same as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance does not have to be displayed as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance. In this way, the performance interest of the look-ahead preview performance can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead preview performance (in Figure 14-31 (D) the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, and in Figure 14-31 (E) the upper area 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower area 006SG005B is moved downward), the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead preview performance, the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as part of the look-ahead preview performance, the performance effect of the look-ahead preview performance can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 14-33, an example is given in which the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 14-34 as modified example 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be made changeable each time the variable display is executed. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be varied depending on the final display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is given as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-35 as modified example 006SG-5, as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, a promotion effect (also called a re-draw effect) may be executed in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type such as a non-variable jackpot or a 2-round variable jackpot with a small number of rounds during the variable display, and then the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and the final combination of decorative patterns that stops indicates the jackpot type.

The presentation mode of the promotion presentation will be explained based on Fig. 14-35. First, the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach presentation, and then, as shown in Fig. 14-35(A), after the end of these reach presentations, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a non-variable jackpot or a two-round variable jackpot (in the example shown in Fig. 14-35(A), the combination is the even number "2" that indicates a non-variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35(B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed variably at a uniform speed as a promotion effect, including combinations of decorative symbols for other jackpot types, such as 2-round special jackpot, 5-round special jackpot, and 10-round special jackpot.

While the promotion effect is being performed, the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left in two stages, as shown in Figures 14-35(C) and 14-35(D).

If the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first (see FIG. 14-35(A)), the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(E)) after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion effect. On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a non- sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(F)) after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect.

In addition, the "degree of advantage to the player" between the types of jackpots in this modified example 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the jackpot is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the number of variable display times that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot play ends, and the number of rounds in the jackpot play.

As shown in Figures 14-36(A) to 14-36(E), the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a background image in the layer 3 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image in which the vertical center is distorted toward the left.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is an image that is longer in the left-right and up-down width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, as in the characteristic part 006SG (see FIG. 14-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-37, the left-right dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 may be the same as the left-right dimension of the display area of the image display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in Figures 14-38(A) to 14-38(C), when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, a non-image display area in which no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

In this case, when the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-37, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A) to FIG. 14-39(D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, or the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area is enlarged, so that a part of the background image is placed outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 due to the enlargement is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, so that the risk of inappropriate display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned non-display area, can be reduced.

In addition, in FIG. 14-39, an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the background image may be enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, an image for the promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion of the image to be displaced that corresponds to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, it is not necessary to displace the image to the extent that it is outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, in the case where the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5, when the promotion performance is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image part during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area may be enlarged in stages according to the progress of the promotion performance (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). In this way, the sense of incongruity caused by the decorative pattern and background image being suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate display such as the display of a non-image part on the image display device 5 in the process of increasing the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the performance effect of the promotion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the reach effect of the super reach during variable display can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pseudo consecutive effect including a temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display can be executed during variable display, and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of a jackpot) can be varied depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

In particular, in a variable display that executes such pseudo consecutive effects, it may be possible to execute a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop just before the timing of the decorative pattern's temporary stop, or a temporary stop notification effect that notifies the user of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of modified example 006SG-5, the left and right dimensions are at least longer than the left and right dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) may be stored in advance in CGROM 205 as an image for the promotion effect, and the image may be drawn and arranged in the displacement image creation area or display image creation area to prevent the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion performance is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and a part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display image area during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a promotion performance is executed, an image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 may be arranged adjacent to the display image in a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modified example 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. In this way, when a promotion performance is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that a part of the non-display image is displayed instead of the non-display image area.

In the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-40 to 14-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these tentative stop suggestion effects and tentative stop notification effects may be executed as effects in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the tentative stop suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 14-40. First, as shown in FIG. 14-40(A), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) and a reach is reached. After that, as a tentative stop suggestion presentation, a pseudo consecutive symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is part of the decorative symbol, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a ripple effect image 006SG005P converging from the periphery of the display area to the center of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the left and right decorative symbols and the background image) is displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40(B), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40(C), the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, but move downward in the display area of the image display device 5 and become invisible, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a miss is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 14-40, a form is exemplified in which a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 to suggest that the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) will temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display forms for the ripple effect image 006SG005P may be provided, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops may be varied depending on which display form the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed in as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance.

For example, in FIG. 14-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 14-41, it is possible to provide a case where only one ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops can be varied according to the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo consecutive effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the decorative pattern, in other words, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the variable display even during periods other than the pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern and a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 14-42(A) and 14-42(B), after the temporary stop indication effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed diffusing from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the periphery of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the decorative symbols on the left and right and the background image) is displayed distorted.

As shown in Figures 14-43(A) to 14-43(F), the temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in this modified example 006SG-6 are as follows: a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area; a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area; and a decorative pattern including a pseudo consecutive pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-6 for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image (decorative pattern and background image distorted by ripple effect image 006SG005P) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006GS, an example was given of a form in which a performance image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only planar images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 14-44 and 14-45 as modified example 006SG-7, a performance image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying stereoscopic images.

Modification 006SG-7 will be described below. Note that in the characteristic part 006SG and the modification described above, an example is given of a form in which a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) capable of displaying planar images (2D images) is used as the image display device 5, but the feature of this modification 006SG-7 is that, as shown in FIG. 14-44, a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used that allows the player to view stereoscopic images with the naked eye using a parallax barrier method, making it possible to display stereoscopic images (3D images) in addition to planar images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 14-44, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 has a structure including an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 with a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is a relatively optically transparent liquid crystal panel that allows for a parallax barrier image display state in which a parallax barrier image is displayed, which has vertically striped black sections that act as shutters to prevent the right eye image (R image) displayed in the vertically long stripes on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 from being seen by the left eye of the player and the left eye image (L image) from being seen by the right eye of the player, and transparent sections that allow the right eye image to be seen by the right eye of the player and the left eye image to be seen by the left eye of the player, and a transparent display state in which all pixels are transparent and do not have vertically striped black sections.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 can display, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of a left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier image described above is made non-display (fully transparent display) on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, so that a planar image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of this modified example 006SG-7, can display a naked-eye stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in addition to a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image.

The stereoscopic image consisting of a right-eye image and a left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the layers described above, just like the planar image (2D image), while the parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When such a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used to display a performance image, during variable display, other performances may be executed by displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) at a timing different from the specific performance (e.g., development suggestion performance) in the present invention.

As shown in Figures 14-45(A) to 14-45(D), during variable display, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is capable of executing a specific effect in which the image of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moving upward as displacement specific images, and the image of the center area 006SG005C moving downward as described above, and a variable display preview effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a preview effect whose execution period does not overlap with the development suggestion effect, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview effect.

In other words, when a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced specific images and move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that is moved downward, are displayed, only the planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and right region 006SG005R moving upward as a displacement specific image, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moving downward as an image are displayed, the display is made to be a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, and thus preventing a decrease in the interest of the presentation.

In this embodiment, since the execution period of the performance in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed differs from that of the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which displacement specific images, images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moved upward, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward, are displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same performance, data such as a display in progress flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed may be stored so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed while the displacement specific image is being displayed, and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted based on the data. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent a stereoscopic image (3D image) from being displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image has ended, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag for a specified period before and after the period during which the displacement specific image is displayed.

In the above-mentioned modified example 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic images (3D images) may be displayed using naked eye stereoscopic image display devices using a lenticular lens method or integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG0-7, a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance may also be provided. In addition, if a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) can be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) that is higher than the image drawing area in which the planar image (2D image) is drawn and arranged. In this way, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) can be displayed preferably in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-7, a form in which a variable display preview effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed in a period different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect) as an effect for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed as an introduction effect for the development suggestion effect (specific effect) in a period prior to the development suggestion effect (specific effect). In this way, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) can make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Furthermore, multiple presentation modes for the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be provided, and the presentation mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be different depending on which presentation mode the introduction effect is executed in.

In addition, the introduction performance may be performed by operating the movable body 32, and the effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance) may be improved by coordinating the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of a stereoscopic image (3D image).

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 14-46 as modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (corresponding to the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J in the characteristic part 006SG) may display medal payout display, remaining number of games in the AT (assist time), medal display stored as credits, etc. together with the presentation image on the image display device 5, and these game-related information may be treated as non-target images for displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each of the modified examples, an example is given of a form in which a special effect of the present invention is performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed or distorted (distorted), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect may be performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is repeatedly changed or distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, the development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention, but multiple effects may be executed as these specific effects. In addition, when multiple specific effects are executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, an effect in which the decorative pattern (characters and numbers) such as the development suggestion effect is not divided can be executed in the normal state, while an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into multiple pieces or display areas such as the revival effect and look-ahead notice effect can be executed. In this way, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the decorative pattern including characters and numbers not being divided, and conversely, in the time-saving state, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by dividing the decorative pattern of only numbers.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and is composed of only numbers in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed midway through the variable display in a specific variable pattern, such as the variable display in the variable pattern of a super reach. For example, in the variable display of a super reach, a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of characters and numbers may be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of only numbers may be executed during the period after the reach. Furthermore, during the period after the reach, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern is divided, such as a revival effect, as a specific effect in this invention.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, an example is given of an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction and displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5. In other words, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in Figs. 14-3 and 14-4, a form of generating a displacement image by a replacement method in which pixel X corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is identified from a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a displacement image may be generated by a method (movement method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image in the displacement target image is moved to a position corresponding to the R value and G value of the pixel A. Note that, in the replacement method, as in modified example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary of the area with different movement directions, whereas in the case of the replacement method, such editing is not necessary, so that the load of creating the image can be reduced, and in addition, when an effect image or the like is placed on the boundary, the degree of freedom of setting the boundary where the effect image is placed can be increased, so that the load of creating the image including the effect image can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
and a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state,
The display means includes:
A display area is provided in which an image can be displayed, and a display image of game-related information relating to the progress of a game can be displayed in the display area;
When the round of play is being played, a given amount display regarding the given amount of gaming value is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined display is not displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount, and a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed;
When the round of play is being played, a guide display can be displayed before the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state,
not displaying a round game display capable of identifying the started round game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and displaying the round game display together with the start of the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
The guidance display is displayed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means so that more of the light emitting means emit light when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by: